Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 20 Left High Intensity Dis 10 5 Amp Powertrain Control Yellow charge HID Headlight Orange Module PCM Starter if equipped 11 25 Amp Auto Shutdown 2 m 20 Right High Intensity Clear Powertrain Control Yellow Discharge HID Head Module PCM light if equipped 12 um um 3 15 Amp Adjustable Pedals if 13 Blue equipped 14 25 Amp Powertrain Control 4 20 Amp AC Clutch Horn Clear Module PCM Yellow 15 20 Amp Injectors Ignition Coils 5 20Amp Headlight Washer If Yellow Yellow Equipped 16 Em ER EM 6 m Amp du Control Module 17 30 Anti lock Brakes System Pink ABS Valves if 7 20Amp Fog Lights if equipped equipped Powertrain Yellow Control Module PCM 8 15 Amp Lights License Park 18 30Amp Windshield Wiper Blue Side Marker Stop Turn Pink Washer 9 15 Amp Front Control Module Blue FCM MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 19 50 Amp Radiator Fan Red 20 20 Amp Starter Blue 21 50 Amp Anti lock Brakes System Red ABS Pump Motor if equipped 22 40 Amp AC Clutch Radiator Fan Green High Low 23 50 Amp High Intensity Lighting Red HID if equipped 24 60 Radiator Fan AWD Yellow 25 30
2. 30 Event Data Recorder EDR 49 Trunk Lock And Release 31 duy oi 90 M Trunk Safety Warning eee 3l H Engine Break In Recommendations 58 Trunk Emergency Release iiie M Safety 59 Occupant Restraints 32 97 Lap Shoulder Belts 33 Lock Your Vehicle 59 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 38 59 Seat Belt Pretensioners 38 S aa ie eer ds 22260 Bet Reminder Sytem arin Saty Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 61 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 39 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 815 1 Vehicle Key The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal The shift lever must be in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Positions NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the p
3. 410 Radial snes da a a hal e ae 274 Replacement 277 Rotatiofi 280 Safety Rx RE es 262271 Self Sealing oz Ru 279 SIZES 3 ed Se 264 Snow Tires 280 Spare SE I eR Hed 315 SPINNING RR AR Ea 275 Tread Wear Indicators 276 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 303 Torque Converter Clutch 243 TOWING ws ee ere ve due qued 298 Behind a Motor Home 309 Disabled Vehicle 325 Gude ardeo teur anie an cy dede Re iat 301 Recreational 2 2 22 2 2 222 309 Weight ime rode 301 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 309 Traction Control 5x aote qun de RES 257 Traction Control Light 257 Traction Control Switch llus 257 Trailer TOWING 25222 21 em o exe a 298 Cooling System Tips 309 ET REGERE 301 Minimum Requirements 304 Trailer and Tongue Weight 303 Winne 12 29 ew s Trailer Towing Guide Trailer Weight Transmission Automate us coto Ree ch Ge eh SNINE beu go rud Y aem d Pea 428 INDEX
4. 1 818 9545 1 Sensor Bars Default Distance Setting is Three Bars Long You can change the distance setting by pulling the lever toward you and release DISTANCE Each time this is done the distance setting toggles between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 18 mph 26 km h and the system automatically disables itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert ATTENTION will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacit
5. 134 66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information 136 Pinch Protect Feature 147 Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 136 Pinch Protect Override 148 la Ovetiead Console ias eri RR me 140 Venting Sunroof Express 148 Courtesy Reading Lights 140 Sunshade Operation 148 Sunglasses Storage 140 Wind Buffeting 22 2 222 2 148 ll Garage Door Opener HomeLink Sunroof 148 n E sn Ignition Off Operation 148 Programming HomeLink He Sunroof Fully Closed 149 M Electrical Power Outlets 149 sateen ns Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 151 Erasing HomeLink Buttons 145 Cup Holders 151 Front Seat Cup Holders Standard 151 Secutity ace ratu das dei dais 146 Front Seat Cup Holders 300 Touring And ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 146 300C Models 152 Opening Sunroof Express 147 Rear Seat Cup Holders 152
6. ROS 11 Key 52 eoo erem ie aids deca 11 Ignition Key Removal 11 Illuminated Entry 17 Immobilizer Sentry Key 13 Indicator Traction Control 257 Infant Restraint 50 51 Inflation Pressure Tires 169 Information Center Vehicle 171 Inside Rearview Mirror 68 Instrument Cluster 161 162 163 Instrument Panel and Controls 160 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 362 Interior Appearance Care 361 Interior FUSES sive koe ge 363 Interior Lights 525525855555 108 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 110 Introduction esee RE dE 4 Jack Location 315 Jack Operation e ee sm 317 Jacking Instructions 317 Jump Starting 4225 5542 aed 322 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Key In Reminder 12 Keyless Entry System 17 m 11 Knee Bolster 22222222222 2 2 41 Lane Change and Turn Signals 107 Lap Shoulder Belts eee 33 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 54 55 INDEX 421 Latch Plat
7. C S C H U L 5 8 302 SCHEDULE Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter 2 od Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors gt Change the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires X Change the Transfer Case Fluid Wheel Drive AWD only 24 2 lt 2 lt lt E E D U L E 5 8 SCHEDULE 393 Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve t Change the automatic transmission fluid a
8. 339 Recommendation 337 382 synthetic 5 622 eee aaa cess 339 VISCOSITY ko dons Kak per p mines 338 339 382 Onboard Diagnostic System 332 333 Opener Garage Door Homelink9 141 Operating Precautions Outside Rearview Mirrors Overdrive Overhead Console 140 Overheating Engine 167 312 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 409 Panic Alarm Park Assist System Rear Parking Brake Parking On Hill iem e Eee Passing Light Pedals Adjustable Personal Settings I c Phone Cellular Phone Hands Free UConnect Placard Tire and Loading Information Power Brakes Distribution Center Fuses Door Locks Mirrors 424 INDEX Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 149 Seats CRM 92 Steering MEE PEE 255 346 Steering Checking ilb eeu 346 SunroOf 255522586 eee eo HERE EY RC 146 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 116 Windows 27 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 40 Preparation for Jacking 314 Pretensioners Seat Belts 38 Programmable Electronic Features 142 145 182 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 21 142 145 Radial Ply Tires 274 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure 351 Radio Broadcast Signals
9. Closing Sunroof Express 147 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67 Storage MP 153 sse dg ear eS Eau da d 153 Console 153 lll Load Leveling System If Equipped 155 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment _ 2 Adjusting Rearview Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated 5 Automatic Dimming Mirror 817892c4 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust th
10. 187 Radio Navigation 206 Radio Operation 188 195 219 Radio Remote Controls 215 Radio Satellite 207 212 Radio Sound Systems 188 195 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 11 Rear Park Assist System 136 Rear Seat Folding oa casei aa cm e 97 Rear Window Defroster 229 Rear Window Features 229 Rearview Mirrors 68 Reclining Front Seats 93 Recorder Event Data 49 Recreational Towing 309 Reformulated Gasoline 290 Refrigerant eee E xe ERE 345 Reminder Seat Belt 38 Remote Keyless Entry 17 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 215 Remote Trunk Release 31 Replacement Parts 334 Replacement Tires 277 Reporting Safety Defects 409 Restraint Head 15 22 bores 94 Restraints Child 50 Restraints Occupant 32 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 324 Rotation Tires sag nace ee Gok HR RS 280 INDEX 425 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 60 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 61 Safety Defects Reporting 409 Safety In
11. 291 Fuel System Cautions 291 209 Carbon Monoxide 292 TOWN BEAUTE A Ra 908 B Adding 1 293 uu x 908 Fuel Filler Gas 293 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 309 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 295 Towns Dus Venice Bune Flat Towing With Four Wheels On The B Vehicle Loading 295 Ground 3349 ed gea 309 Vehicle Certification Label 295 234 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for belts a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by p
12. 106 INDEX 417 Dealer Service iic prm hehe hee RSS 334 Defroster Rear Window 229 Defroster Windshield 61 220 225 Delay Intermittent Wipers 110 Diagnostic System Onboard 332 Dimmer Switch Headlight 107 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 352 Door Locks 0663440000 RR 22 Door Locks Automatic 24 Door Opener Garage 141 Drive Belts aer ERE AR T EG MEE 340 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 250 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 210 Electric Remote Mirrors 70 Electrical Power Outlets 149 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 118 121 Electronic Stability Program ESP 259 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 168 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 171 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 324 Hazard Warning Flasher 312 Jacking xk oa BAe e Eee ana 314 Jump Starting ex 322 Overheating iss dh Wo deed ea 312 TOWING ups e RETR GA 325 Emission Control System Maintenance 333 386 Engine c eue ek re ege 329 330 331 Air Cleaner 2 5 a e Rd 341 Block Heater x 065006408 6440 pes 237 Break In Recommendations 58 Checking Oil Level 335 336 Compartme
13. SCHEDULE 399 SCHEDULE Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X M A C 5 D U L E S 8 E E U L E S 8 400 SCHEDULE A Drive AWD only Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X required Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months X if not done at 102 000 miles Check and replace if necessary the PCV
14. Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 21 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Sheba 141 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 21 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 17 Transporting Pets 56 Tread Wear Indicators 276 Trip Odometer 242522255205 eR a ees 167 Trunk Release Emergency 32 Trunk Release Remote Control 31 Turn Signals 107 163 UConnect Hands Free Phone 72 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 410 Universal Transmitter 141 Unleaded Gasoline 289 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 38 Vanity Mirrors 422225 Re ee 71 Variance Compass 179 Vehicle Certification Label 295 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 268 295 297 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage rans 226 370 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 210 Warning Flasher Hazard 312 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 163 Warnings Cautions 6 Warranty Information 408 Wash
15. cherokee aes 409 Setting the Clock 186 190 196 207 Settings Personal 182 Shif hg sisri ced 237 Automatic Transmission 237 240 245 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 37 Shoulder Bells ss Eier 33 Side Airbag sese re es 46 Signals Turn ss EE es ree oen Rem os 107 163 426 INDEX Slippery Surfaces Driving 250 SmartBeams Jerem e e REG ves 104 Snow Chains Tire Chains 279 SNOW DITES ecen REN RE GREEN mee ung 280 Spare Dire a ve rate ers 274 275 315 Spark Plugs iacere PRE em a 340 Speed Control Cruise Control 118 121 Speedometer eed 163 otar ng nates He x HES REY m 234 Automatic Transmission 235 Engine Fails to Start 235 Starting and Operating 234 Starting Procedures 234 Steering Column Contfols 22225 56 106 linkage aaa ete RE EUR 346 Power 222 Sos Se 255 346 Column Ass 5 8 Rv IER 115 116 Wheel Tilt 3222255 9 6 115 116 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System COONS arava 8 res b teta nome tes 215 OLOTAge des e a P RARE b 153 370 Storage Vehicle 226 370 Storing Your Vehicle 370 Sun Roof ssessal eem Rer dE E 146 Sun
16. Front Control Module Pink FCM 26 20 Transmission RLE Blue 27 30Amp Front Control Module Pink FCM CAUTION e When installing the Power Distribution Center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribu tion Center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 5 55 84244393 Rear Power Distribution Center 813449 Opening Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD 13 Yellow 14 10 AC Heater Control 2 40Amp Battery Red Cluster Sentry Key Re Green mote Keyless Entry 3 15 20Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod 4 40Amp Battery Y
17. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e 2 meets the seat back and just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Ai Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
18. WARNING You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situa tions i e in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes and when towing a trailer When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control lever located on the left side of the steering column operates the ACC system 818e850d 1 RESUME ACCEL 2 SET DECEL 3 CANCEL 4 DISTANCE SETTING 5 ON OFF Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is between 25 mph and 100 mph Canada 30 km h and 180 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays READY When the system is OFF the EVIC displays OFE NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in P Park R Reverse or N Neutral When the Electronic Stability Program ESP is switched off e Whe
19. e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or
20. Available With Auto Headlights Only 111 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 111 Adding Washer Fluid 112 lil Headlight Washers If Equipped 113 Adding Washer Fluid 114 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 115 WB Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column Equipped 116 Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 117 Electronic Speed 1 118 Electronic Speed Control Operation 118 TO Activate sues x aue doe dr a eddie 119 To Set At A Desired Speed 119 Te Deactivate i cies ced Rs 119 Resume Speed 119 To Vary Speed Setting 120 To Accelerate For Passing ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Equipped 5 tenes Y ea Yes Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 123 To Activate C 124 To Seta Desired Speed 422 t 125 To Cancel sa Re RR Ras Bache 126 To Turn Off 2 2 rd e ERE 126 To Resume Speed 2222 2222 2 126 To Vary The Speed Setting 127 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 128 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 129 Display Warnings amp Maintenance 132 Precautions While Driving With
21. Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 BeltAlert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti vating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 Withi
22. WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us ing the Overdrive range such as when operating the STARTING AND OPERATING 243 vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly ter rain traveling into strong head winds or while tow ing heavy trailers NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section e If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The trans mission will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent
23. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident 25 The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on STARTING AND OPERATING 253 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 k
24. TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM 25256 REC Radio Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a var
25. Tape Player Seek Button Fast Forward FF Rewind RW Tape Eject Scan Button Changing Tape Direction Metal Tape Selection Pinch Roller Release Noise Reduction Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play Load Bject Button CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Navigation System Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped REC Setting The Clock Audio Clock Display 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Wi Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV If Equipped 210 li Satellite Radio If Equipped 212 System Activation 4s ese eae Bead as 212 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 212 Selecting Satellite Mode In And rod 213 Selecting a 213 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 214 Using The PTY Program Type Button IEEquipped set idriss me cea weed pes 214 PTY Button Scan eu ets Rer EE 214 PLY Button ed 214 Sa
26. hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI 414 KPa Cold Inflation Pressure e Avoid driving more than 50 miles 80 km before replacing tire and wheel e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 MPH 80 km h speed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 Wheel Cover Installation If Required VALVE VALVE NOTCH MOUNTING STUD HERES COVER LUG NUT 80 6062 1 Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve stem 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel 3 Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts 5 Return to Step 9 of the Jacking and Changing a Tire procedure 322 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to
27. meters gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 5 persons amp NO 100 Ibs 45 kg meters Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 3 5L amp 5 7L Automatic 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 2 persons amp Lug 200 Ibs 91 kg meters gage 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 3 persons amp Lug 200 Ibs 91 kg meters gage 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 4 persons amp Lug 150 Ibs 68 kg meters gage 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 5 persons amp NO 100 Ibs 45 kg meters Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 81546c40 Consider
28. 108 114 120 126 132 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 X months if not replaced at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X X X SCHEDULE 403 Miles 138 000 144 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 240 000 250 000 Months 138 144 150 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required X X Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts WARNING You can be badly injured
29. 275 Tire Spinning a ERES 275 Tread Wear Indicators 276 LEO TIE 44 4 34 gale eae dead pateris 277 Replacement Tires 277 Alignment And Balance 278 H Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 279 Tire 279 E now lies 9 tee ened ade 280 Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations 280 lll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS IC Bquipped top RAD RES e Rer es 281 Base System If Equipped 284 STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Premium System If Equipped 285 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 296 General Information 288 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 296 Fuel Requirements 289 Overloading ss iced DRACO 296 27L 14 sa 289 297 3 5L And 57L 289 W Trailer Towing Reformulated Gasoline 290 Common Towing Definitions Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 290 Trailer Hitch Classification MMT In Gasoline 290 Trailer Towing Weights Materials Added To Fuel
30. 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light Inner Park Light and Outer Park Light 300 Models 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly 1 High Beam Headlight Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlight Bulb 818dadeb 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 4 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 5 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 3 8189 97 4 5 818dafcb 3 Park Turn Light Bulb 4 Inner Park Light Bulb 5 Outer Park Light Bulb 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service Low Beam Headlight High
31. Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual 276 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tir
32. Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used re
33. Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To unlatch the trunk Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
34. ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or Doors 1st Press appears Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When ON is selected you can use your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjust able pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until or OFF ap pears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or with
35. S Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one an other in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger
36. must be e low road noise spoken eight zero zero 5 e smooth road surface Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing fully closed windows Sue number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some low to medium blower setting e Audio quality is maximized under When navigating through an automated system such low to medium vehicle speed as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of oe 7 e low road noise speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended e fully closed windows and e It is not recommended to store similar sounding e dry weather condition 1 TM names in the UConnect phonebook e Operation from driver seat 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Occasionally Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can genera
37. switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within 5 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set NOTE Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in Park but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a memory profile NOTE The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Linking amp Unlinking the Remote Keyless Transmitter to the Memory Feature Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be pro grammed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To program your transmitters perform the following 1 Remove key from ignition 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the Set S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your transmitters can be u
38. the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press Preset 1 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks and WMA Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 S
39. wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or frame Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the
40. 11 Wi llluminated Entry System 17 Ignition Key Removal Il W Remote 17 Key In Ignition Reminder 12 To Unlock The Doors 18 la bt Key ss een se kd ent ea ee Shed es 13 To Lock The Dodie ues se y e thats 20 Replacement 14 To Unlatch The Trunk 20 Customer Key Programming 14 Using The Panic Alarm 20 General Information 15 Programming Additional Transmitters 21 Security Alarm System If Equipped 15 Battery Replacement 21 Rearming Of The System 15 General Information 22 To An The Systema tientas 15 PR Deer Locks ao tira 22 To Disarm The System 16 Manual Door 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Door Locks 23 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 40 Child Protection Door Lock 25 Seat Belt Extender 40 B Windows 27 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Power Windows 27 ML M Wind Buffeting
41. 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend ing downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant Speed Control can be dangerous where the system need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes an infrared can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your go too fast for the conditions and you could lose path within a distance of 328 ft 100 m control An accident could be the result Don t use NOTE 30 Speed Control in heavy traffic on roads that winding icy snow covered or slippery e Ifthe sensor does not detect a vehicle directly ahead of you ACC will function in the same way as standard cruise control system For additional information refer ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF to Electronic Speed Control in this section EQUIPPED 2 e f the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead will Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving apply limited braking or acceleration automatically so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling that your vehicle maintains a preset following dis on highways and major roadway
42. 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction
43. 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicl
44. ACC Ready When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped Attention If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped ACC Unavailable If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system deactivates due to perfor
45. Alarm Theft Alarm 15 Anti Theft System 168 Appearance 359 Auto Down Power Windows 28 Auto Up Power Windows 28 Automatic Dimming Mirror 68 Automatic Door Locks 24 25 Automatic Headlights 103 Automatic Temperature Control 221 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives 357 Automatic Transmission 240 245 356 357 Adding 357 384 INDEX 415 Autostick 222 2 249 Fluid and Filter Changes 357 Change 1 625 dem x ete bak os 357 Fluid Level Check bs 356 Fluid exe RR n xe 384 Gear Ranges obese e rage 241 Shifting scies SR RES 240 245 Special Additives 357 Torque Converter i rk emn 243 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 244 AUtosiick ue Dee eR PE 247 249 Ball Joints 22525559555 EX e OR 346 Battery acd A b doe tede 343 Emergency Starting 322 Jump Starting 322 Keyless Transmitter Replacement 21 Location os eR RO OR pes 322 343 Bearings 2 222092 lees amp ER edis 358 Belts Drive 340 Belts Seat x sobre ants 33 Body Mec
46. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at the washer solution regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multi function lever on the steering column seater
47. Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light 300C High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge Headlights HID when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 4 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 5 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise 818db130 3 Park Turn Light Bulb CAUTION 1 Low Beam Headlight Bulb Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil p igh Beam Headlight Bulb contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface c
48. Description Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circuit tridge Fuse breakers that are only serviceable by an authorized Fuse dealer The Cluster without power memory seat the 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if Driver Seat Switch with power memory seat and the Red equipped Memory Module if equipped are fused by the 25 amp 40 5 Amp Heated Seats if circuit breaker in Cavity 11 The Passenger Seat Switch is Orange equipped Inside Rear fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12 The view Mirror Door Modules except base the Driver Door Lock 41 10 AC Heater Control Park Switch base the Driver Express Power Window Switch Red Assist if equipped Tire if equipped and the Passenger Door Lock Switch base Pressure Monitoring if are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13 If equipped you experience temporary or permanent loss of these 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor systems see your authorized dealer for service Pink 43 30 Amp Amplifier if equipped Pink Antenna Defrost 44 20Amp Amplifier if equipped Blue Front Control Module FCM Sunroof if equipped 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE STORAGE CAUTION If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 e When installing the Power Distribution Center days you may want to take steps to protect your battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop You may erly positioned an
49. Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System LSE 81350206 Manual Temperature Controls Blower Control ee 81241942 The rotary knob on the left controls the blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turned to the
50. Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STA
51. OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Cancel To Turn Off The system will disable ACC without erasing the The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if memory if You softly tap the brake pedal e You push and release the lever ON OFF e You depress the brake pedal e You turn off the ignition e You push the speed control lever away from you e You switch off ESP To Resume Speed e If ESP TCS activates Push the lever up and release RES ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Dr HN rr The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate to sharply for safe operation This could cause an accident and or serious injury I 1 819725e0 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To Vary the Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by lifting and holding the lever up RES ACCEL If the lever is continually held the set speed will continue to increase 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments until the lever is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Lifting the lever up and releasing once will result in a 1 mph Canada 1 km h increase in set speed Each sub sequent lift and release of
52. OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex treme left provides the coldest setting Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting Mode Control 812d193c The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the op erator to fine tune airflow distribu gizaigz7 mode settings are as follows e Defrost 5 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary DefrostlFloor Ge Air flows through the front and rear floor X6 outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located wp under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets lo cated on the floor Air f
53. Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details WARNING Moving the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be a
54. Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 3 5 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Stan dard MS 6395 Engine Oil 5 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 2 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 5 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment Fuel Selection 2 7 Liter 87 Octane Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter 87 to 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7 Liter 87 to 89 Octane 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Front Axle API Certified GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Power Steering Re
55. This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in section 7 See page 335 for more information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED 03 5 FM Door Ajar 818c9c36 Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and tachometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons described in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System Status 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle information warning message displays Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped Personal Settings customer programmable features e Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following butto
56. Tire 317 Compact Spare 320 Wheel Cover Installation If Required 321 Bl Jump Starting Procedures 322 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With Four Wheels On The Ground ru bue RR hed RE NO 325 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 326 312 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Hazard Flasher Switch To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of th
57. VEHICLE Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges trunk hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and we
58. WARNING Push the speed control lever inward toward O the steering column and release ON OFF instrument cluster on some models will illu minate to show that the speed control system is ON To steering column again and release At this time the system and the indicator light will turn off Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever down and release SET DECEL Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE e Speed control will only function in third fourth or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode if equipped The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal e Push the speed control lever away from you CAN CEL Pushing and releasing the lever ON OFF or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the speed cont
59. Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multi function lever to one of the six intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multi function lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions Choose setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity Place the lever in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position e The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance e The Rain Sense feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual The rain sensing system has protective features for the
60. X valve Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X Change the Transfer Case Fluid Wheel X SCHEDULE 401 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Replace the spark plugs 2 71 3 5L Engines X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive X AWD only Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102 000 X miles if not done at 60 months Replace the air conditioning filter X X Rotate the tires X X X X X M A T C S C H U L E 5 8 H E U L E S 8 402 SCHEDULE NENNEN Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 126 000 132 000 Kilometers 180 000 190 000 200 000 210 000 220 000 Months
61. YOUR VEHICLE 151 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup Holders Standard CAUTION The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the center console e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the Front Seat Cup Holders alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Seat Cup Holders 300 Touring and 300C Rear Seat Cup Holders Models The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the between the rear seats The cup holders are positioned center console forward i
62. activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to sy
63. and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner
64. at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside o
65. be changed as follows Normal Usage Front Differential No Service Required Refer to Maintenance Schedule A Transfer Case Severe Usage Front Differential Transfer Case No Service Required Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Severe Usage is defined as 1 More than 50 of vehicle operation in stop and go traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation such as in heavy city or in construction zone traffic 2 Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recomm
66. brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically 244 STARTING AND OPERATING at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considere
67. bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 256 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only Continued operation with reduced power steering This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others off four of the
68. button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays Channels Cleared after 20 seconds however do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Pro gramming Step 2 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device a previously trained HomeLink button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The EVIC will display Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 for 20 seconds and then change to Channel X Training Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming Step 2 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to
69. by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or appears Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to SmartBeams in section 3 of this manual for more information SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct Analog Clock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you co
70. children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode in this section for details A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking re
71. choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground Information Provided by DEALER WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Hazard Warning Flasher 312 if Your Engine Overheats 312 H Jacking And Tire Changing 314 Preparations For Jacking 314 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 315 Jacking And Changing a
72. destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine off and allow the vehicle to cool Ther
73. erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with 55 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 81351e5e Power Sunroof Controls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any
74. filter if not re X X X X X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X M A C S C H U L 5 8 308 SCHEDULE Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors Change the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Rotate the tires X 2 lt gt lt lt gt lt gt lt Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive AWD only M A N E 5 H E D U L E S 8 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re sions warranty ceipts This maintenance is not required if previously replaced
75. first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 242 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of P Park before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position R Reverse For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking the vehicle N Neutral Engine may be started in this range with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage
76. following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 326 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed truck CAUTION Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transmis sion remains in NEUTRAL TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 2 7L Engine Compartme
77. front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power 30 available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash The center console outlet is powered directly from the receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your battery power available at all times Items plugged into authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent switch in the LOCK position engine starting ooo 2 Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
78. having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems
79. instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until
80. not proceed to the I M station 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed serv
81. object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express
82. or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or Mopar Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry c
83. pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should
84. pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of California California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE e For vehicles equipped with a 2 7L engine follow Schedule A or B from 0 to 150 000 miles 0 to 250 000 km e For vehicles equipped with a 3 5L or 5 7L engine follow Schedule A or B from 0 to 120 000 miles 0 to 200 000 km There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an 9 Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 Stop and go driving MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387 Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice e Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance rec ommendations in Schedule B in this section NOTE If ANY of these apply to y
85. setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Chil dren should be seated and using the proper re The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an straint system additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seat Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic
86. should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 Engine Air Cleaner Filter For normal driving conditions inspect and replace the engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Sched ule A For vehicles driven frequently in dusty or under severe conditions inspect and replace the engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule B WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your local dealer for service Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will
87. support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while
88. suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS Example Only 812cb8da EXAMPLE ONLY Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 Ibs 932 kg 819 kg Load Including driver pas 271 165 579 lbs sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 Ibs 2384 Ibs 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 lbs 2708 Ibs 1155 kg 1228 kg 208 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs This table is only an example TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reas
89. switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 inches 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 3 5 inches 90 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 1 2 inches 30 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 2 4 inches and 3 5 inches 60 mm and 90 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 2 4 inches 60 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual TO OPEN AND CLOS
90. tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Chec
91. the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Low pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists NOTE The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare STARTING AND OPERATING 285 tire However if you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound each ignition key cycle Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires
92. the engine compart ment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide C
93. the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest Power Reclining Seats The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the Seat In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Control Lever Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button B0b34e13 Adjustable Head Restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats which are available only with leather upholstery provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The controls for the driver and front passenger heated seats are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel F
94. the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignit
95. trim inside the vehicle before closing the door panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 2 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC position and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear doors are closed Th
96. wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON and the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multi function lever is moved or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freez ing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the trans mission shift lever is in the N Neutral position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multi function lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the N Neutral position Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents 818 9 14 Washer Fluid Reservoir The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon 4 liters of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle
97. without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certai
98. 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast if available from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display T
99. 8 Memory Seat sete REC as 98 Memory Seats and Radio 98 Methanol ERG E EE 290 Mini Trip Computer 175 MITOS eei ERS RUSO Oa RUN 68 Automatic Dimming 68 Electric Remote 70 Exterior Folding 2 69 Heated soda XE ate ow 71 Outside 2255 EG Es 69 REATVIEW xe neg Rer Sce emus 68 Vanity cei cee ede kho xal rk eee ee 71 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 281 Mopar Parts 334 408 MTBE ETBE 290 Multi Displacement Engine System 256 Multi Function Control Lever 106 INDEX 423 Navigation Radio 206 Navigation System 206 New Vehicle Break In Period 58 Occupant Restraints 32 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 289 Odometer 225522242 pe ERIGARP IU ERREUR E 167 167 Oil Engine 335 383 Capacity E Seda 382 Change Interval 337 Checking e RR 64 335 336 DipsticK 2 2 e Rn 335 336 Disposal 4 04 ehh ERR es 340 Filet f ee tere 340 383 Filter Disposal 340 Identification Logo 338 Materials Added to
100. ACCESSORY position 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in
101. BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 25 24232221 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 81724577 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER W 103 5 FM 42 Door AJar 25 24232221 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 81724591 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Electronic Speed ControllAdaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control or ACC is ON See page 118 for more information See page 121 for more information 2 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank See page 293 for more information 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON See page 106 for more information 4 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 NOTE Check for a defective outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate See page 107 for more information 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EV
102. Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the level of the coolant in t
103. DOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT WASHER FLUID LEVEL 96 WINDSHIELD ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG STEERING FLUID AND WASHER C B E AIRBAG f MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF 7 a 2 TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE OUTLET Low PEDALS 1 KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATEO S SEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET MONITOR e o C HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN CONTROL Pj A LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL P bt VOICE SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON r1 4 L LOWER ANCHORS SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO INTRODUCTION 5 ELECTRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE Eo BRAKE SYSTEM HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKIN
104. E 168 Speedometer ib mnes 163 Jachometer 52 55 5559 eee gee ie Re 164 Gear Ranges e ew eR ead 241 General Information 15 22 136 288 Glass Cleaning 361 Gross Axle Weight Rating 296 298 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 296 298 GVWR 5225552 26258 455 REIR RR RES 296 Hands Free Phone UConnect 72 Hazard Warning Flasher 312 Head Restraints 94 Headlight Washers 113 347 Headlights cse ere es ee hae es RES 374 Cleaning eese am Eae eS 361 High Beam hed 107 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 107 Lights On Reminder 106 On With Wipers 104111 Cni CE 107 103 Time Delay ee oe lee ex Ea 105 Washers 245522555 113 347 Heated Mirrors 71 Heated Seats 95 Heater TP rc ICT 219 Heater Engine Block 237 420 INDEX High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer vencer pe gae ER SE Poe 107 Hitches Trailer Towing 301 Holder Cup tre eem es 151 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 4 505484 9684400 844 141 Hood Release 101 HOSES 2224 ee Vox OR S OR ORO 353 354 lgrutione sick oH
105. E 21 The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 23 feet 7 meters from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming See page 14 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing downward re move the small screw if equipped 2 Separate the two halves of the transmitter with a flat blade tool Do not damage the rubber seal during re moval 7 Separating Transmitter Halves 81182c72 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the tr
106. E THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 818c748d Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches 15 and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Headlight Switch x The headlight switch is located on the left side of y the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights 4 Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second dete
107. EEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD LOAD Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the
108. EMERGENCIES JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the WARNING edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off 2 Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in the road to avoid the danger of being hit when PARK operating the jack or changing the wheel 3 Turn OFF the ignition Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your 4 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Hazard Flasher Switch WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 5 Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage
109. ENT PANEL turn on in the event of an EBD failure Immediate repair of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD failure The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should turn on for approxi mately two seconds and then turn off The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on or if the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized dealer NOTE The light will turn on when the ignition switch in the ON position and the parking brake is applied This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application See page 253 for more information 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi tions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped See page 257 for more information See page 259 for more information 14 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate
110. F button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension M
111. G CONTROL ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DRIVE BRAKE WARNING HAZARD 81916970 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title gue VIN LOCATION NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN B08ce9e3 INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Information Provided by DEALER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys
112. IC messages when the appropriate conditions exist See page 171 for more information only on vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted switches NOTE On non EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer is located here Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See page 332 for more information 7 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 8 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condi tion When this light turns on the engine tem perature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned off immediately and serviced as soon as possible See page 312 for more information 9 Anti Lock Brake Light If Equipped 553 This light monitors the Anti Loc
113. If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sun roof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Window Airbag NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy ment Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Cur tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to seve
114. Information Center EVIC if equipped are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED The multi function lever operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are ON The multi function lever is located on the left side of the steering column To use the headlight washers push the multi function lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and release it The headlight washers will spray a timed high pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens In addition the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The headlight washers will operate on the first washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the spray of the windshield washer and then every fourth system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water spray after that E 818c9c1b Washer Fluid Reservoir Headlight Washer WARNING Adding Washer Fluid The headlight washer and windshield washer share the Commercially available windshield washer solvents same fluid reservoir The reservoir is located in the front are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the must be exercised when filling or working around vehicle
115. LED will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperat
116. M SYSTEM message for 3 seconds when a system fault is detected In the event that a fault occurs because the system did not receive a pressure value from one or more Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors the EVIC will display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 NOTE You can change the pressure units to display in PSI kPA or BAR Refer to Language under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual for details If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire However if you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound each ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will still display a low pressure message and a
117. MENT PANEL 205 The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the file or MP3 and WMaA selection
118. MENT PANEL 217 Tape Player Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the next track on the cassette Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current track begins to play Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button twice to listen to the second track on the tape three times to listen to the third track and so forth Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side of the tape being played CD Player Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button twice to listen to the second track on the CD three times to listen to the third track and so forth Satellite Radio Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer t
119. O which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check th
120. Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 and WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next file Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player LOAD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
121. RTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 et 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 811 4040 Tire Placard Location D 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 268 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and tra
122. Restraints 94 Heated Seats If Equipped 95 Folding Rear Seat iis Rer hp 97 Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 98 Programming The Memory Feature 98 Linking amp Unlinking The Remote Keyless Transmitter To The Memory Feature 99 Memory Position 100 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 100 To Open And Close The Hood 101 W Lights 24d x XE yi terse 103 Headlight Switch 103 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 103 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 104 Smartbeams If Equipped 104 Headlight Time Delay 105 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 106 Lights On Reminder 2 2 106 Fog Lights If Equipped 106 Multi Function 106 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 108 Interior Lights 108 lll Windshield Wipers And Washers 109 Intermittent Wiper System 110 Mist Feature s css see ade a RA 110 Windshield Washers 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65 Headlights On With Wipers
123. S cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the
124. S OF YOUR VEHICLE System off e Proximity warning e ACC unavailable service ACC warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after 5 seconds of no ACC activity Display Warnings amp Maintenance ACC Unavailable Warning The ACC Unavailable Warning will display when condi tions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow fog heavy rain or when driving into direct sunlight sunrise or sunset The ACC system may also become temporarily unavailable due to obstructions such as dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display ACC UNAVAILABLE 4 SNMP abies 111101 mi 111 81913445 If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located behind the grille slightly offset from the center of the grille UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 ACC Sensor Location To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the sensor mount Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor re alignment e If the sensor is damaged due to an accident see your authori
125. SA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail re
126. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 10 INDEX 465 v3 9 9399 a3 AY y a ax aV ve X EY EYE Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Introduction 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
127. STANCE Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles On
128. Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable through For details refer to Delay Power Off to Acces sories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happen
129. System ICS if equipped before rocking the vehicle For details refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control Sys tem in this manual WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the following limitations With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the
130. Tether Anchors 54 55 Child Safety Locks sace ree a RR 25 Clean Air Gasoline 290 Cleaning WLieels ERES 360 Clim te Control eA Rap ERES 219 Clock DD 186 190 196 207 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 218 Compact Spare Tire 274 COMPASS ssa petu Va a 178 Compass Calibration 178 Compass Variance 4i es om eek 179 Computer Trip Travel 175 Console usse Re Y 153 Console Floor 2i2 s e9 be Rv ee Y YEA 153 Console Overhead 140 Contract Service 408 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 351 Cooling System cs regem RE 349 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 351 Coolant Capacity 382 Coolant Level e ku 349 352 Disposal of Used Coolant 352 Drain Flush and Refill 350 Inspection 352 Points to Remember 352 Pressure Cap 2 222 2 4 351 Radiator Cap 351 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 350 382 383 Cruise Control Speed Control 118 121 Cruise sesso Re 163 Cup Holder 2 151 362 363 Customer Assistance 406 Data Recorder Event 49 Daytime Running Lights
131. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells B e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 15 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic show
132. The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap Opening The Access Panel 316 WHAT TO DO EMERGENCIES 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 812c555e 8125587 Jack Fastener Spare Tire Fastener WARNING 4 Remove the spare tire 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 Jacking and Changing a Tire 1 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked N BLOCKA 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 3 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully Center Cap Removal WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth 318 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 5 Place the jack u
133. U S Metric Fuel approximate 27 Liter Engine 18 gal 68 liters lons 3 5 Liter Engine 18 gal 68 liters lons 5 7 Liter Engine 19 gal 72 liters lons Engine Oil with Filter 2 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 6 0 qts 5 7 liters API Certified 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 6 0 qts 5 7 liters API Certified 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 7 0 qts 6 6 liters API Certified Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engine Mopar 9 9 qts 9 4 liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine without All 11 1 qts 10 5 li Wheel Drive Mopar ters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine with All Wheel 11 4 qts 10 8 li Drive Mopar Antifreeze ters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe 14 7 qts 13 9 li Duty II Cooling System Mopar ters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe 15 1 qts 14 3 li Duty II Cooling System Mopar ters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive
134. Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either
135. a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after wh
136. a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 15 Trip Odometer Button Trip Odometer Button Base Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles kilometers A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Trip Odometer Button Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Pus
137. a second time to stop the search 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable con tent can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite A
138. acture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the 5 designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride STARTING AND OPERATING 281 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Follow the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for th
139. afe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt Wt 2 7L Automatic 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 2 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg meters gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 3 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg meters gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 4 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg
140. again after initial start up 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ACM detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de signed to activate o
141. ain manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as pos sible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if differ ent from the speed recommended by the manufac ture 280 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manuf
142. amaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are sus
143. and will apply the rear wheel brakes Synchronizing ESP The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS malfunction indica tor light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction indicator light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP TCS Indicator Lights The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator light and the yellow ESP TCS indicator light in the instru ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running ESP BAS The system will turn the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchro nized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markin
144. ansmitter case snap the two halves together If so equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves 5 Test the transmitter operation General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward Door Lock Plunger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door Power Door Locks the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not A power door lock switch is on each front door
145. apor Harnesses 353 Fuel System 354 Brake System 354 Automatic Transmission 356 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 358 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 358 Appearance Care And Protection From COFTOSIOD RR e awed 359 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300 Models erre rem m 362 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 300C And 300 Touring Models 363 Fuses Power Distribution Centers 363 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 363 Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center 366 W Vehicle Storage sisvees ERR REO hn 370 B Replacement Bulbs 371 Bl Bulb 372 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light Inner Park Light And Outer Park Light 300 Models 372 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight And Park Turn Light 300 374 Backup Light Side Marker Light And Tail Stop Turn Light 300 Models 376 Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Light And Backup Light 300C Models 378 License Light aya ehe Od 381 Fluids And 382 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 383 Engine 3 daret oe cbe ta e 383 Chass
146. ar Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers Headlight Washers If Equipped The windshield washer and the headlight washer if equipped share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
147. arm will sound If this occurs disarm the system If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if so equipped For details refer to Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal amp Approach Light ing under Mirrors in Section 3 of this manual The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at th
148. arward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 165 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an
149. ary depending on driving habits and vehicle usage 819793f8 4 Cylinder Operation MDS On es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase the time in which the fuel saver mode is active 819793f4 8 Cylinder Operation MDS Off e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km mm estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Elapsed Time Shows the total elaps
150. as passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode and Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the m Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button
151. asSme ERU rA dete sa Readit g cres Rr ERE Seat Belt Reminder Service ove we pos AD Ox ea o C eR UR Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator SmartBeams Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 169 281 Traction Control 4443443539639 x9 a hex 262 Turn Signal 106 107 163 422 INDEX Vanity xk 71 Voltage esee ed oat a eee oe 170 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 163 Load Leveling System 155 Loading Vehicle eR ex 295 297 Capacities AD Rae E pa a 297 Tires i 99e 267 LOCKS 22 Auto Unlock i n 25 Child Protection 25 DOOf sies x xk Rx E 22 Power DOO 2 xs Sore ar 23 Low Tire Pressure System 281 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH BRA Less 54 55 Lubrication Body 346 Lumbar Support 94 Maintenance Free Battery 343 Maintenance Procedures 335 Maintenance Schedule 386 Schedule A 399 Schedule Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine sse ee mre 170 333 Manual Service lt 4 60 64 ax RR 409 Memory Feature Memory Seat 9
152. ased coolants Use of Propy lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure
153. ases Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into e The weight and position of cargo and passengers position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Chil dren should be seated and using the proper re straint system To help protect against personal injury passen gers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in persona
154. at at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor Or 1 Defrost Si needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 CAUTION REAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window Defroster The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the located on the climate control Press this button to rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illumi interior surface of the window nate when the rear window defroster is ON The de Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm froster automatically turns off after approximately 10 water minutes of operation for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button Information Provided by DEALER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Starting Procedures Automatic Transmission Normal Starting Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 299 If Engine Fails To Start After Starting E Engine Block Heater If Equipped Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission General Information Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 4 Speed Automatic Transmis
155. b site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 ESN SID Access With RAO and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes h
156. backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped For vehicles equipped with Autostick By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example
157. bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior 300 300 Touring Models Bulb Number Low Beam 9006 High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn 3757AK Front Inner Park 194NA Front Outer Park Light 194NA Front Fog Light If Equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker W5W Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop Turn 3057 Rear 168 Backup Light ecu sade veda RUE 3057 Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL LED LICENSE Bok Ge be dees BG Ee 168 LIGHT BULBS Exterior 300C Models Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight Standard Halogen 9006XS Low Beam Headlight High Intensity Discharge HID 2944 RR 015 Serviced at Dealer High Beam Headlight 9005 Front Park Tum 3157 Front Fog Light 9145 10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker W5W Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop Light 4 oL mmm s 3057 LIBE sec ned de A Ex ARES 3057 Tum Signal Light RR Re 3057 Backup Light 2 04 ses pe veh Reb hs 3057 Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL LED Outside Mirror Turn Signal amp Approach Lights LED License ugue Pe XR ec draps edes kS W5W
158. by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 274 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial
159. cceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seatbelt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works The Airbag Control Module ACM determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direc tion provided by the ACM The ACM will not detect roll over The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate ez The ACM also turns on the Airbag Warning t Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ACM detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on
160. ce problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 202 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 293 ADDING FUEL NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel fill
161. ce the MMT STARTING AND OPERATING 291 content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer if his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without in Canada because can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance or damage the emission control system e out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performan
162. chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 165 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 5 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It
163. could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System L
164. crease or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the di
165. ct the brake hoses e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension damage components e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the termi e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps M A E 5 H E U L E 8 nals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder and add as needed SCHEDULE SCHEDULE Follow Schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an 9 Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 389 e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vices e Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance rec ommendations in Schedule B in this section NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engin
166. cted according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection e UConnect Active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The WT number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength leases The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call Incom ing Call 20 Analog Roam 5 a 949 Mail Message The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message C Battery Strength Ca
167. d a normal condition Pulling the selector lever into the 3 position will show that the transmis sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e f the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmis sion automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into P Park e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into D Drive and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the probl
168. d be pres sure tested for leaks e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced
169. d fully latched Failure to do so Disconnect the negative cable from the battery may allow water to get into the Power Distribu tion Center and possibly result in an electrical e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of system failure service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Light 579 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity 6 A6220 Glove Box 194 Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for re placement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base
170. de 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System under Starting and Operating for details In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants that have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil is allowed for use in the 3 5L Engine during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART 1 1 1 10W 30 Preferred 20 0 10 209 32 60 80 29 48 4974 0 16 27 Temperature ra
171. djusted while driving The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON One of the following messages will display in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC if equipped if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed posi tions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever located on the left side of the steering column operates the system 81916 88 1 RESUME ACCEL 2 SET DECEL 3 CANCEL 4 ON OFF To Activate The indicator light in the lever and in the turn the system OFF push the lever inward toward the
172. dlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Park Assist System If Equipped When ON is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the R Reverse or N Neutral position To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Turn
173. do not Perform the maintenance listed in Hof this overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR a loss of control poor performance or damage to or GCWR ratings brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Also chec
174. e neds donee 34 Latches re See Med eres 61 Hood 23d em aie Red od cede ema gres 101 Lead Free Gasoline 289 Life of Tires Ree Rd 277 Lights ai back PR ha 61 103 Airbag eds 46 49 60 165 AnE LOOk 164 255 Automatic Headlights 103 Brake Assist Warning 262 Brake Warming 165 253 Bulb Replacement 371 Courtesy Reading 108 140 Cruls 2252505 ERR 163 Daytime Running 106 Dimmer Switch Headlight 106 107 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicatof 259 262 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 168 Engine Temperature Warning 164 o mM 106 163 Hazard Warning Flasher 312 Headlight Switch 103 Headlights 52428525 bs 103 374 Headlights On With Wipers 104 111 High Beam sex 107 167 High Beam Indicator 167 Illuminated s RR 17 Instrument Cluster 103 163 nerit enes pr eR RIDERE 108 140 IER Ic PT 381 Lights On Reminder 106 Low Fuel 1263223 en Ro dE e Mi don dos 163 Low Tite 402 44S ES 169 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 170 Oil Pressure ou E P
175. e Press the Phone button to begin 2 that only the phonebook in the current anguage is deleted Alter prompt andthe following Beep say Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will Daten to Peer then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 List Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the
176. e Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Pho
177. e vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on that transmitter however the but tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter buttons for all keys 815afa1a Keyless Entry Transmitter 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons
178. e body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breath ing CO follow the safety tips below If you are required to drive with the trunk open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been d
179. e coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule B in this section M A C S C H U L S 8 390 SCHEDULE Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 Kilometers 5 000 10000 15 000 20000 25 000 30 000 Change engine and engine filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X d quired Replace the air cleaner filter fem Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X BB rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X 7 Rotate the tires X X X E S 8 SCHEDULE 391 Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000 Kilometers 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 60 000 Change engine and engine filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve Replace the air conditioning filter X X Rotate the tires X X X M A
180. e cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the CAUTION intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount engine coolants result in engine damage and of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling may decrease protection Ifa non HOAT system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old fied coolant as soon as possible antifreeze solution Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct coolant type This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol b
181. e following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission neutral but do not increase engine idle speed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WARNING an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system and turning off the A C others could be badly burned by steam or boiling removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature coolant You may want to call a service center if your control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the the fan control to HI This allows the heater core to act as hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling from the engine cooling system System Pressure Cap paragraph CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 314 WHAT TO DO
182. e from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT accordingly Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park with a single chime Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime ACC Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183. e outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror This feature is also available on the passenger outside mirror of mirrors equipped with turn signal and approach lighting 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal amp Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contai
184. e recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything caus ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 282 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
185. e sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be Always wear your seat belts even though you modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the have airbags Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual 9 If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Airbag Control Module ACM Side Remote A
186. e sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The TCS OFF button is located in the center of the instrument panel To turn OFF the TCS momentarily press the button and the TCS Indicator Light will illumi nate To turn the system ON again momentarily press the TCS OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the TCS by pressing the 5 OFF button CAUTION When the TCS Indicator Light is illuminated con tinuously the TCS is switched off Avoid spinning one drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drive train NOTE e The Traction Control System comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the Traction Control Button to turn OFF the system e The Traction Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED WARNING The BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilitie
187. e tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs Turn bulb sockets counter clockwise to 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the remove tail light assembly 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem 6 Disconnect the electrical connector bly 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 818db1af 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 818db1b4 818db1b9 2 Tail Light Bulb 3 Turn Signal Light Bulb 818db1c9 4 Backup Light Bulb 9 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 10 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 13 Close the trunk MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 22 818db273 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 4 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 5 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 6 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the Screws 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
188. e that you have engaged the selector lever into the P Park position e When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of P Park before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position R Reverse Shift into R Reverse gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped N Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage N Neutral position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans mission damage STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Drive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upsh
189. e throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h A C N 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is op
190. eafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Battery Location 8134298a 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is corrosive acid solution and can It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with a
191. ed Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied
192. ed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com COM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears er
193. ehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink IF WARNING EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to e A moving garage door can cause injury to people three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper and pets in the path of the door People or pets ate devices such as garage door openers motorized could be seriously or fatally inj ured Only use this gates or home lighting It triggers the
194. ellow ule if equipped Green 16 E 5 30 Heated Seats if 17 20 Amp Cluster Pink equipped Yellow 6 20 Fuel Pump 18 20 Selectable Power Outlet Yellow Yellow 7 E m 19 10 Stop Lights 8 15 Amp Ignition Switch Airbag Red Blue Control Module ACM 20 9 20 Console Power Outlet 21 Yellow 22 10 23 11 24 125 25 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 26 35 5 Amp Amplifier if equipped 27 10 Airbag Airbag Control Orange Antenna Ignition Red Module ACM e e 5 E onsole Passenger Door a oe B Lock amp Express Power TTE Window Switch if 29 5 Amp Anti lock Brakes Module equipped Power Mir Orange if equipped Cluster rors if equipped Rain Front Control Module 5 if Powertrain Con d 2 Key 36 20 Amp Hands Free Phone if less Entry Stop Lights 41 30 10 Door Modules Power equipped Red Mirrors if equipped Satellite Receiver if Steering Control Module equipped 31 37 E 15 Amp Transmission 32 Blue 33 38 5 Analog Clock Cargo 34 Orange Light Overhead Con sole ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Cavity Car Mini
195. em could recur STARTING AND OPERATING 245 If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears Selector Lever Gear Ranges P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 246 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensur
196. endations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear
197. ened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or alike into the child lock control and pull it upward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2
198. engine s eight cylinders during light load Service should be obtained as soon as possible and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return CAUTION to full functionality after a battery disconnect Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur STARTING AND OPERATING 257 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF EQUIPPED WARNING The Traction Control System TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible B
199. er Adding Fluid 112 114 347 Washers Headlight 113 Washers Windshield 110 347 Washing Vehicle 359 Wheel Alignment and Balance 278 Wheel and Wheel Trim 360 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 360 Wheel Bearings i e eR EE REO 358 Wind Buffeting esc so eR een 30 148 Window Airbag Side Curtain 42 46 INDEX 429 Window Fogging 227 Windshield Wiper Blades 347 27 Windshield Wipers 109 ROSAS ay edge xa Rus 27 Wiper Blade Replacement 347 Windshield Defroster 220 225 Wipers Intermittent 110 Windshield Washers 109 110 347 Wipers Rain Sensitive 111 Tiad cerne RS EUER Med eS 347 NOTES NOTES NOTES
200. er the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value NOTE Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper ti
201. er car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in STARTING AND OPERATING 265 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
202. er door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Gas Cap Tether Hook i2 81368080 Fuel Filler Door 204 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION WARNING Damage to the fuel system or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filler tube cap gas cap tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into running the fuel system A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e Whe
203. ere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner Therefore no belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and re placed if required Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule inspect belt and belt tensioner condition Inspect belts for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components See your authorized dealer for ser vice Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set
204. erformance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the selector lever in the D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the selector lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indica tor You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage Autostick simply 250 STARTING AND OPERATING move the selector lever to the Right or Left D D while in the D Drive position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen ALL WHEEL DRIVE IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time Wheel Drive AWD with Anti lock Brake System ABS Traction Control The front wheels provide 38 of the torque and the rear wheels provide 6276 of the torque The system is auto matic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be us
205. es can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure v TREAD WEAR INDICATOR someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle pro
206. es represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 414 INDEX ABS Anti Lock Brake Syste
207. estraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section
208. etermine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 tbs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ips Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811 4411 STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING 1 Safety Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading WARNING can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inf
209. ettings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Power Remote Control Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror 15 activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window position Defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 30 An illuminated vanity mirror is the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Power Mirror Control NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Illuminated Vanity Mirror 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice
210. f the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
211. fer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option
212. flashing pressure value in the graphic display Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update auto matically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will stop flashing and display a new pressure value as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States KR55120123 x ose e e Cox 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engine Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab an octane of 87 3 5L and 5 7L Engines The 3 5L and 5 7L engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide 89 satisfactory fuel economy and
213. formation Tire 262 Safety Tips cease aye x HORA Re ded 59 Satellite Radio 207 212 Satellite Radio Antenna 214 Schedule Maintenance 386 Seat Belt Maintenance 362 Seat Belt Reminder 38 Seat 32 33 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 37 And Pregnant Women 40 Child Restraint 50 51 52 56 Extender 2 40 Front Seat 33 34 Operating Instructions 34 PretensionerS 38 isum ru erhet 33 Reminder 168 Untwisting Procedure 38 ERA RU EG 92 Easy Entry Gud ace EE poeti e 100 Heated iua be no EEE UG eR ER 95 Lumbar Support 94 Memory eR e Rex ei 98 BOWED secs fe te tte at toate obo fe tots 92 Rear Folding ees een ye 97 em e e as 93 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 168 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 350 383 Self Sealing Tires x2 exe Ree 279 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Service Assistance 406 ServiceContracE ssec ea eee dee ee gt 408 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 170 Service Manual
214. fter the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light will flash If it does not illuminate the 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se system is not arming Also if you open a door during the arming period the system will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system e The system remains armed during trunk entry Press ing the trunk button will not disarm the system If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the al
215. glasses Storage 140 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 41 Synthetic Engine Oil 339 System Navigation 206 Tachometer a 164 Telescoping Steering Column 115 116 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 221 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 166 313 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 54 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Theft System Security Alarm 15 Tilt Steering Column 115 116 Tire and Loading Information Placard 267 Tire Identification Number TIN 266 lire Markings ek e 262 Tire Safety Information 262 THESE hiv y rane Eus 61 271 410 Aging Life of Tires 277 Air Pressure tale 271 Alignment urges baee Ege mets 278 INDEX 427 Ch insS 522 ee eR dna ed 279 Changing sciens eek ear y 314 317 Compact Spare iess sm doka Yes 274 Flat Changing 2 vis eg 314 General Information 271 High Speed eL ents 273 Inflation Pressures 272 a ee 314 317 Wires ue aan a wean Poe A 277 Load Capacity sse ets 267 268 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 281 Quality Grading
216. gs SERVICE DESCRIPTION MAXIMUM LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY a AND STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 STARTING AND OPERATING 263 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 200 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passeng
217. h in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset it 16 High Beam Light This light will turn on when the high beam 7 headlights are ON Push the Multi Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam See page 106 for more information 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 17 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving See page 38 for more information 19 Vehicle Security Alarm VSA Indicator Light If Equipped The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming and slowly when the VSA is armed See page 15 for more information 20 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a proble
218. han C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flatly to the cassette 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1
219. hanism Lubrication 346 B Pillar Location erre ERR REF 267 Brake Assist System 258 Brake Parking soseer 09 Sei bee RR RR ee ees 251 Brake System nsn Eom x 253 354 Anti Lock ABS 05 52 eS es 253 Fluid Check 55 25 XE ERR 355 384 HOSES a AR Rode Se 354 Master Cylinder 355 Parking eec dup REESE 251 Warning Light 165 253 Brakes odo EUNDI a d 253 Brake Transmission Interlock 240 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 58 Bulb Replacement 372 Bulbs Light lt cseteris ccs RR 371 Calibration Compass 178 Capacities Fluid 382 Caps Filler Buel serere sss Ob Pe Hh ee 293 Engine onse Rm 338 339 Radiator Coolant Pressure 351 Car Washes 359 Carbon Monoxide Warning 59 292 416 INDEX Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 217 Catalytic 341 CD Compact Disc Player 188 195 Cellular Phones CREER 72 Chains Tife uu ede rene dd ui Ed ES 279 Changing A Flat Tire 314 Chart Tite Sizing exei excicke p x t ER 264 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 333 Child Restraint 50 52 55 56 Child Restraint
220. has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 211581266174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery t
221. he bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system shoul
222. he interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in Strument panel lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The multi function lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the igni
223. he programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step 2 Do not repeat Step 1 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release your hand held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted successfully by HomeLink The EVIC will display Chan nel X Trained where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Proceed with Programming Step 4 to complete the procedure Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink
224. ice information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level gro
225. ich the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the U
226. ides increased forward light ing at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view To Activate 1 Select Automatic High Beams ON through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter in Section 4 of this manual 2 Rotate the headlight switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 3 Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to the HIGH BEAM position NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph 40 km h To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system 1 Pull the Multi Function Lever toward you to switch the headlights from the HIGH BEAM to the LOW BEAM position 2 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO A to the ON position NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improp erl
227. ie pursuant to a warrant copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Seatbelt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Cruise control status if applicable e Traction stability control status if applicable
228. iety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears FM 92 5 On CHRYSLER DRE 81999ef2 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save
229. ifts and down shifts and best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear selection The AutoStick feature can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the D Drive position The gear currently selected is indi cated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the next lowest gear for best acceleration NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in D direction the transmis sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revolu tions per minute RPM limit would be exceeded Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction and the transmis
230. il requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this 346 MAINTAINING YOUR
231. iler towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this STARTING AND OPERATING 269 manual to d
232. immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in this manual WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking
233. ing occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instru ment panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in Park before the switch will operate Trunk Release Button The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter two times With the ignition ON the trunk open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the key in the lock position or key out the trunk open symbol will display until the trunk is closed TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE T
234. ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Low pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound ad zi ninne aun ni 819793fc NOTE You can change the pressure units to display in PSI kPA or BAR Refer to Language under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual for details STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists In addition to the telltale and chime the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a CHECK TP
235. ion will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SALES CODE RAK AM FM CASSETTE CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE VIDEO MP3 and WMA CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate DIR RND PTY 6 DISC WMA PUSH AUDIG 8132a436 RAK Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to opera
236. ious Music Religious Talk Religious Music Religious Talk Personality Personality Public Public College College Unassigned Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NOTE If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a PTY seek Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the left and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selecti
237. ire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in the Starting And Operating section of this manual Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Monitor in the Start ing And Operating section of this manual Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Service Park Assist System with a single chime Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Vehicles with the 5 7L Multi Displacement System MDS may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the Trip Functions of the EVIC The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders which will v
238. is MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 2 71 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES POWER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR COOLANT DISTRIBUTION CENTER DIPSTICK ACCESS COVER BOTTLE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE COOLANT AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING FLUID POSITIVE BATTERY POST OIL PRESSURE FILTER FLUID BOTTLE 818d5bb5 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT BRAKE FLUID COOLANT RESERVOIR PRESSURE ACCESS COVER CAP FUSES POWER AIR CLEANER DISTRIBUTION CENTER FILTER REMOTE JUMP WASHER START POSITIVE FLUID BATTERY POST BOTTLE ENGINE OIL ENGINE COOLANT POWER STEERING DIPSTICK OIL FILL BOTTLE FLUID 819198b4 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 5 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES POWER COOLANT BRAKE FLUID COOLANT DISTRIBUTION PRESSURE RESERVOIR BOTTLE CENTER CAP ACCESS COVER WASHER FLUID BOTTLE 818d5c19 REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE OIL ENGINE AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING POSITIVE BATTERY POST DIPSTICK OIL FILL FILTER FLUID 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these s
239. itch is in the LOCK position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed Brake Interlock Override For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON positions Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the selector lever The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored tab which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin While the override is pressed the shifter can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return the rubber storage tray to its original position 4 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Selector Lever Gear Ranges P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position
240. k Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer See page 253 for more information 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator light will turn when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion The light should go out with the engine ESP BA es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 running The system will turn this light on continu ously while the engine running if it detects a malfunc tion in either the ESP or the BAS or both See page 259 for more information 11 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a 9 bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspec
241. k the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petrole
242. k the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this cou
243. king at the display above the rear window The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Rear Park Assist Indicator 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 47 in 120 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 31 5 in 80 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 25 5 in 65 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red at 12 in 30 cm In termittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red at 8 in 20 cm Con tinuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots be fore backing up You are responsible for safety and must con
244. l Checks Brakes asado Ede CERE EU 355 Cooling System 349 Engine Qil 335 336 Power Steering cue x EH a 346 Fluids eacee acest o desee 383 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 383 Fog Lights e o RR 106 163 Folding Rear Seat 97 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 324 Front Suspension Ball Joints 346 Front Wheel Bearings 358 ee Lao Rates REA 289 Adding lassus Geese RES 293 Clean Air bh selene 290 Ethanol 5555 Re d 290 Filler Cap Gas Cap 293 Filter 341 Gasoline persnr ao nnie aatia a EE 289 Gauge aides spe MARE ee 168 OSES pero eR ke ERES E ee 354 Methanol 206 466 sev eimai ee od e 290 Octane Rating orienti e ERA 289 383 Requirements ye nes 289 382 Tank Capacity aaa tes 382 Fuel System Caution 294 Bueling 1 2522 293 BUSES ke rx e ORA eR eM x OR 363 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 141 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 293 332 Gasoline Clean Air 290 Gasoline Fuel 289 Gasoline Reformulated 290 Gauges Coolant Temperature 166 uel ized b Ru e TER TER P EH
245. l Information CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Classification Specifications DIN EN 60825 1 2003 60825 1 2001 REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle Refer to the Warnings Cautions and Notes in this section for system limitations and usage recommendations The Rear Park Assist System is active when the driver shifts the transmission into the R Reverse position and the parking brake is not applied and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h The system can be turned on or off when the vehicle is in PARK through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper warning display contains two sets of yellow red to scan for obstacles up to 59 inches 150 cm away from LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the rear bumper fascia The warning display located the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind above the rear window provides both visible and audible the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs warnings to indicate the range of the object either through the rear view mirror or by loo
246. l injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 160 Base Instrument Cluster 161 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster 162 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 163 Electronic Vehicle Information Ce
247. lation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 272 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the d
248. ld lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN PINS PARK GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector STARTING AND OPERATING 307 308 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LH LAMPS STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND Qu BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and
249. lean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 81840043 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Backup Light Side Marker Light and Tail Stop 3 Pull back the trunk liner Turni Light 300 Models 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the 1 Open the Trunk tail light assembly 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side assembly 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 812c4b54 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 7 Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem bly 818db197 1 Backup Light Bulb 2 Side Marker Light Bulb 818db19d 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 818db1a3 3 Tail Stop Turn Light Bulb 9 Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly 10 Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner 13 Close the trunk Tail Stop Tail Turn Signal Light and Backup Light 300C Models 1 Open the Trunk 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly 812c4b54 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 3 Pull back the trunk liner 7 Pull th
250. ll in Progress x Phone Not Avail able UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the battery strength of the UConnect phone The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone connection has been made The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently not avail able 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating
251. lluminates when manual compressor opera tion is selected 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An LED in the button illuminates when the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow Recircula tion to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer t
252. lly be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Voice Command Tree Main Menu Towing English Francais Last Number on Phone is redialed Enter Number Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart 819402e8 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Entries Listed one at a time New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 8131b294 Enter Location Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English E Prompts nglish Espano on off temporarily or Francais to be deleted Enter Name of phone and f
253. loth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap sol
254. low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 818c9c09 Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain Do not put anything on or around the front airbag airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers or attempt to manually open them You may covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating
255. lowing list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B in the Maintenance Schedules in this manual If none of these applies to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A in the Maintenance Schedules in this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Gra
256. lows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to par tially block airflow E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the C amp S recirculation feature You can choose Bi Level Recirculation air outlets Panel Re circulation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mode Normally air enters from out side the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains
257. ls can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system volt age The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 24 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys tems The light will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 332 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 25 Oil Pressure Warning Light E
258. lters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instruc tions 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 4 and turn A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle t set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level pts with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on If it s cloudy or iat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature ii p control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost Sg oe CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear g 14404 4 CS COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor 7_ If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS i In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra he
259. lugs 2 71 3 5L Engines X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Change the rear axle fluid X Replace the air conditioning filter X Flush and replace engine coolant at 102 000 miles if X not done at 60 months Rotate the tires X X Change the Transfer Case Fluid All Wheel Drive X M A C 5 E U L E 5 8 E E U L E S 8 306 SCHEDULE Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X Replace the air conditioning filter X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months X if not replaced at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X SCHEDULE 397 Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 205 000 210 000 215 000 220 000 225 000 Change engine oil and engine oil
260. ly See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transp
261. ly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves B18e955e ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are travelling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it will not until it may be too late to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 818 9563 Using ACC on Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 2 424 Genera
262. ly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR es STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW Tongue weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
263. m 253 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 2 2 5 2 4 121 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 351 Adding Fuel 22225 Re ER 293 Adding Washer Fluid 112 114 347 Adjustable Pedals 54s eek e ee xn 117 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 341 Air Conditioner Maintenance 344 Air Conditioning sss 219 221 Air Conditioning Controls 219 Air Conditioning Filter 227 345 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 228 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 344 345 Air Conditioning System 219 221 344 Air Pressure Tires 169 272 PID AS 42 6 Se phe dh Ed EA 41 Airbag Deployment 45 47 Airbag Light e 46 49 60 165 Airbag Maintenance 48 54 esas ym ER ben 46 Airbag Window Side Curtain 42 46 Alarm Security Alarm 168 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 Alignment and Balance 278 Wheel Drive AWD 250 358 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 214 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 350 351 382 Disposal cent eee Eee gena 352 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 253 Anti Lock Warning Light 164 255 Anti Theft Security
264. m h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops 254 STARTING AND OPERATING You also may experience the following when the brake WARNING system goes into Anti lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated elec tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference short time after the stop caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause pos sible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified pro e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations fessionals e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their end of the sto effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on These are all normal characteristics of ABS your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti lock system AB
265. m home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area adjust the front seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat injured or killed Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch Do not allow people to ride in any area of your plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts go around your lap
266. m with the Elec tronic Throttle Control system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the gear selector in park and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire p
267. mance limiting conditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped Service ACC If the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information if so equipped Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In Reverse with a single chime only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats Channel 1 2 OR 3 Transmit Channel 1 2 OR 3 Training Channel 1 2 OR 3 Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Channels Defaulted Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in the Starting And Operating section of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in the Starting And Operating section of this manual Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in the Starting And Operating section of this manual Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on T
268. me Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 236 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Un burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly Do not overspeed the engine If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the NORMAL STARTING procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as
269. meLink button and observe the EVIC display If the EVIC displays Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 then programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming Step 2 Do not repeat Step 1 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If your garage door opener fails to respond to the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver and your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995 it may have a multiple security code system rolling code system Please proceed to Steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most common garage door openers require this step 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE You will have 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete t
270. memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visual signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after 3 minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter A
271. mpted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Call Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call Dial by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial or Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person
272. must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options are at any prompt say Help follow ing the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep y
273. n 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE When the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuck led Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE distinctive label on the webbing Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder
274. n brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voic
275. n four LEDs which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the hazard flashers will also activate these LEDs The fourth uppermost LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the gear selector lever is moved out of the P PARK position Tilt in Reverse Feature If Equipped The Tilt in Reverse feature tilts the outside rearview mirrors downward when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the transmission is in the R Reverse position This feature provides the driver with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse The Tilt in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal S
276. n output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fa
277. n pressing the RES ACCEL switch without a previously set speed in memory 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Activate To turn the system OFF push the lever inward toward Push the speed control lever inward toward the steering steering column again and release At this time the column and release ON OFF The menu in the system will turn off and the EVIC will display EVIC displays ACC READY OFF WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it 1 818e94fb UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 To Set a Desired Speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set lever down and release SET DECEL The EVIC will speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead e The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal THE DRIVER OVERRIDE m 818e9515 PE 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
278. n the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup holders Close the cover when the cup holders are no longer needed Rear Seat Cup Holders Front Seat Cup Holders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 STORAGE Console Features The center console contains a large storage bin The storage bin contains a four slot coin holder designed to hold various size coins and a rubber mat at the bottom of the bin for noise control The bin is large enough to hold a portable AC DC converter to power laptops games or other electrical equipment Two slots at the top right side of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the driver and the front passenger The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains a penholder a tissue holder and a tire gauge holder In addition to the internal storage the console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel c
279. n the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 of this manual for more information VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle 206 STARTING AND OPERATING
280. n your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from you
281. names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and then say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not
282. ncern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC the radio
283. nd X filter Replace the air conditioning filter X X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months X if not done at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X M C S C H U L 5 8 394 SCHEDULE Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X d quired Replace the air cleaner filter X X om Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X D rotors IM Check and replace if necessary the PCV X 3 valve f Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X SCHEDULE 395 AWD only Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine X Replace the spark p
284. nd release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse If Equipped When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the transmission is in the R Reverse position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of R Re verse To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Turn Hea
285. nderneath the lift area that is closest to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counter clockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange while the wheel is still on the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 JACK SADDLE SUPPORT MUST BE POSITIONED DIRECTLY UNDER THE FLANGE OF THE SILL 812dab8b Jack Engagement Locations 320 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 8 Mount the spare tire For vehicles equipped with wheel covers refer to Wheel Cover Installation Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare 9 Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter clockwise 11 Fully tighten the lug nuts Torque the wheel lug nuts to 100 ft Ib 135 N m 12 Store the flat tire jack and tools WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve
286. ne and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR e Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 e Performance is maximized under e UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the low to medium blower setting name in the phonebook Nel speed e You can say letter O for 0 zero 800
287. nge anticipated before next oil change 10W 30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants that have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and wh
288. nlinked to your memory settings by pressing the Set 5 button followed by the UNLOCK button on the transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park a message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit ter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit ter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons S 1 or 2 on the drivers door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition
289. nly in certain side collisions When the ACM with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ACM detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and o
290. ns mounted on the steering wheel Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System MENU Status Personal Settings and Telephone if Button equipped gt FUNC TION SELECT Button A v SCROLL Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also advances the radio to the next preset station changes the side of the tape being played if so equipped or changes the current CD track being played if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also seeks up and down the radio stations CD track numbers if so equipped or satellite radio channels if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen 2 AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio station frequencies any one of twelve radio station preset frequencies CD disc number CD track number tape or any one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 If Compass Temp Audio is already displayed when the AUDIO button is pressed then the radio mode will chang
291. nt 329 330 331 Coolant Antifreeze 349 383 Cooling sk eens ERE ee ere a Eee 349 Exhaust Gas Caution 59 292 Fails to Start c ud ce e 235 Flooded Starting 235 Fuel Requirements 289 382 ks 335 382 383 Oil Change Interval 337 Oil Filler Cap i5 dem n 338 339 418 INDEX Oil SelecHOn 552 dee REI RESET 337 382 Oil SynthetiC oe ke oi ay tee ee 339 Overheating xc moe x ese as 312 Temperature Gauge 166 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 48 Ethanol 290 Event Data Recorder 49 Exhaust Gas Caution 59 60 292 348 Exhaust System 2 xem e Rn 59 348 Exterior Folding Mirrors 69 Exterior i235 xm eem e 103 Filters Air Cleaner 22222222222 22 2 341 Air Conditioning 227 345 Engine Fuel 341 Engine Oil s s eem 340 383 Engine Oil Disposal 340 Flashers Hazard Warning 312 Turn Signals acc cae ninis 107 163 Blash Io Pass 4 2 mE 107 Flat Tire Changing csetera 314 Flooded Engine Starting 235 Floor Console 2 22 153 Fluid c ex eee Rem x eR 382 Fwd 61 Fluid Leve
292. nt 329 BE 3 5L Engine Compartment 330 WB 5 7L Engine Compartment 331 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD 332 Loose Fuel Cap 332 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PrOgrams uus ka Sas e px En AS 333 Bl Replacement Parts 334 Dealer Service 334 Bl Maintenance Procedures 335 Engine Oll 2255558 et 335 Engine Oil Filter susci RR 340 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 340 Spark Plugs 340 Ip amp 2qEngine Air Cleaner 341 Fuel Filter 4 44 ive eva aca S Catalytic Converter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance 344 A C Air Filter If Equipped 345 Power Steering Fluid 346 Front amp Rear Suspension BallJoints 346 Steering Linkage 346 Body Lubrication 346 Windshield Wiper 347 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Washers Headlight Washers If Equipped nes cede be ee eR 347 Exhaust System 348 Cooling System iss er ERES 349 Hoses And Vacuum V
293. nt for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF according to ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the headlight switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means the headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual SmartBeams If Equipped The SmartBeam system prov
294. nt you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call Toll Free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grad
295. ntenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions 818c9c36 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display This is located in the upper part of the instru ment cluster between the speedometer and tachometer 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL VOL UME Button 2 AUDIO MODE Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Pres
296. nter EVIC If Equipped 222 24 44 aes 171 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays secre PPS 173 Functions ies pg vete me creme 175 Compass Display 178 Telephone If Equipped 180 Navigation If Equipped 182 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features bea dd a eu era H Setting The Analog Clock 186 Bl Radio General Information 187 Radio Broadcast Signals 187 Two Types Of Signals 187 Electrical 187 AM Reception 187 FM Reception a ds deo y ee 187 lll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 188 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Sales Code AM FM Cassette CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone Video MP3 And WMA Capabilities Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operating Instructions
297. o Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system fi
298. o one of the following positions Defrost 5 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor 3 outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets lo cated on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air condition 5 ing during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidi fied air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button i
299. o the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multi function lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned OFF the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn OFF Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual Rain Sensing
300. ocated in the center of the instrument panel To turn OFF the ESP momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS indicator light will illuminate To turn the system ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF button STARTING AND OPERATING 261 When ESP is switched off the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable However a fea ture of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately 24 mph 40 km h and 50 mph 80 km h CAUTION When the ESP TCS indicator light is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Avoid spin ning one drive wheel This may cause serious dam age to the drive train CAUTION If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off key in the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK or ACC position Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged
301. ollow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402 4 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary Zero Add location Confirmation prompts Delete a name Language List names List paired phones Pager Phone pairing Phonebook Return to main menu Select phone Set up North American English Alternate s Oh Add new of them Confirmations prompts Delete Select language List all List phones Beeper Pairing Phone book Return Main menu select Phone settings phone set up SEATS Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Seat Recline Switch WARNING Do not ride with
302. on Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Tape Eject Press this button and the cassette will disen gage and eject from the radio TAPE Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press Preset 6 The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch is turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player
303. on or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case and Front Differential The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole The transfer case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the output shaft The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes The fluid should
304. on for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays
305. on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE After engaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the vehicle s ignition key or alike into the child lock control and pull it downward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or
306. onably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles even
307. ontinuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to in
308. operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual AW OY X D WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE R eri 2 277 ty FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH 4 574 FUELFILL SIDE REAR WIN
309. or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery Let the engine idle a few minutes Then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE For vehicles equipped with ESP refer to Syn chronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 of this manual if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after start ing the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 324 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control
310. or quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which includes HomeLink system messages The EVIC is located in the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and tachometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center 818c9c36 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays Chan nels Cleared after 20 seconds however do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds Do not repeat this step if programming a second or third hand held trans mitter to the remaining HomeLink buttons 8125e19b HomeLink Buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons 3 Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is complete NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted under Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming 4 The EVIC will display Channel X Training where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Release both buttons after the EVIC displays Channel X Trained NOTE If the EVIC displays Did Not Train repeat Steps 2 4 5 Press and hold the just trained Ho
311. ormally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Automatic Transmission General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle Loading e Driving Style e Selector lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles STARTING AND OPERATING 239 The selector lever is automatically locked while in the P Park position To move the selector lever out of the P Park position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Shift the selector lever
312. ort Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquai
313. ou then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule B in this section NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A C S C H U L E 5 8 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operation warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu proper fit racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Hy Page e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if Change the engine oil filter required e Inspect the exhaust system Once a Month e Inspe
314. ou can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 NOTE www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing and follow the audible prompts When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be pro
315. our vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear STARTING AND OPERATING 279 SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the ch
316. ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack From Belt WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt o
317. out the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press a
318. ower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages
319. ower window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window PST switches radio power sunroof if equipped and An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes remove key from the ignition and lock all doors after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either when leaving the vehicle unattended front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition Electronic Vehicle Information Center in switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Section 4 of this manual key NOTE Key In Ignition reminder only sounds WARNING when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate p
320. ower windows other controls or move the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 second
321. pected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS pes M NrrOTS rera ane RAO d 68 Heated Remote Control Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror 68 ed eds n Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 71 Equipped cu atin cag acti giao thse ates aed 68 Hands Free Communication UConnect Outside Mirrors 69 E Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Operations a wA a 73 It Equipped aux erede 69 Phone Call Features ses e 79 Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped 69 UConnect System Features 81 Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal amp Approach Advanced Phone Connectivity 85 Lighting 70 Things You Should Know About Your Tilt In Reverse Feature If Equipped 70 UConnect M Systetm i oir eee bates 86 Power Remote Control Mirrors 70 64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE po P C ETT 92 Power Seals ecu oe enm 92 Power Reclining Seats 93 Lumbar Support 94 Head
322. perfor mance when using high quality unleaded 800dfab gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline or mid grade gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available 200 STARTING AND OPERATING Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated ga
323. ping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before c
324. ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident 1 ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION
325. portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
326. pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient tempera ture is 68 F 20 and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 157 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only aft
327. push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be danger ous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that
328. r or passenger Temperature Control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 22 is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 The system will automatically control recir culation However pressing the Recircula tion Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the
329. r neck 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control Module refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced
330. r skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or
331. radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace NOTE MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders only Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the F
332. ratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is Daed COMPASS VARIANCE MAP m 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is sele
333. re frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the Side Curtain Airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop erly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to mak
334. re mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE Itis particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 15 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and
335. ressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the key to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a ti
336. ressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset See page 281 for more information 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market whee
337. river s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is on the headlight switch below the dimmer control To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the fog light switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multi Function Lever The multi function lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818 9 32 Multi Function Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights Moving the Multi Function Lever up or down also causes the corresponding turn signal indicator in the outside mirror if so equipped to flash For details refer to Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal amp Approach Light ing under Mirrors in this section You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes If either light
338. river s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated STARTING AND OPERATING 273 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change
339. rol without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M speed To do so push the lever up and release RES ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing the lever up and holding RES ACCEL When the lever is released a new set speed will be established Pushing the lever up and releasing RES ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is pushed up and released speed increases so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push the lever down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Pushing down and releasing the lever SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is pushed down and released speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to
340. ront Heated Seat Switch On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switch After turning on the ignition you and your passenger s can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs will illuminate for high one for low and none for off 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select high level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Opera tion on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat NOTE Once a heat
341. runk Emergency Release Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if so equipped side curtain airbags for the driver and passen gers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away fro
342. s it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related tran sponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When
343. s However it is not a tance safety system and not designed to prevent collisions WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your com plete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and station ary objects i e a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light for example sunrise or sunset is directly shining on the front of the vehicle Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
344. s pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors When the switch is pressed the window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger windows will be disabled Window Lockout Switch Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffet
345. s CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved 123456 819 09 5 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 To switch the clock to the small clock quickly press TIME again 123456 5 14 819a09ac 4 To toggle back to the large clock simply press TIME VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the center console storage bin under the armrest lid Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Accessing The VES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Raising The DVD Screen Remote Control Location 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation NOTE Your vehicle s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius we
346. s additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with thi
347. s of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others STARTING AND OPERATING 259 The Brake Assist System BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program ESP The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capa bility during emergency braking maneuvers The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver s braking style This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking power during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF EQUIPPED WARNING The ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckles
348. s or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine 260 STARTING AND OPERATING power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS indicator light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP OFF button is l
349. s process YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407 e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe 05109 Mexico D In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSI
350. s the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio station frequencies any one of twelve radio station preset frequencies CD disc number CD track number tape or any one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle If Compass Temp Audio is already displayed when the AUDIO button is pressed then the radio mode will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT accordingly When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to advance the radio to the next preset FUNC Station to change the side of the tape being TION played if so equipped or to change the cur SELECT rent CD track being played if so equipped Button when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek v up and down the radio stations CD track SCROLL numbers if so equipped or satellite radio Button channels if so equipped The following describes the operation of the SCROLL button in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
351. se devices at the transceiver with a garage door opener that has a push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off soya d ide ubi by federal ea safety standards This includes most garage door your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not are needed use a garage door opener without these safety 4 features it could cause injury or death Call toll z _ oe Transceiver free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at AOE NNER Alari is Acte www homelink com for safety information For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 sistance 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that you install a new battery in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed This will allow f
352. servoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle API Certified GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Transfer Case Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant LX P N 05170055AA or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 386 Schedule B ee alae gree Maintenance 286 Schedule AT ee ada M A T C S C H U L E 5 8 5 H E U L E 5 8 386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establish ment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified
353. sion 5 Speed Automatic Transmission ll AutoStick If Equipped AutoStick Operation All Wheel Drive If Equipped E Driving On Slippery Surfaces Accelerator uus ador I es MACH IEEE li Parking Brake Brake System Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped 232 STARTING AND OPERATING B Power Steering 255 E Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L Engine Only 256 Traction Control System TCS If Bguipped spa es S Rp 257 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 258 Electronic Stability Program ESP It EQUIP PO 405 odore pact eoe qs 259 Synchronizing ESP 261 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator And ESP TCS Indicator Lights 262 Bi Tire Safety Information 262 Tite Markings see ERR 262 Tire Identification Number TIN 266 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 267 Tires General Information 271 Tire Pressure d isses depu e 271 Tire Inflation Pressures 272 Radial Ply Tires 2222 55 emn 274 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 274 Limited Use Spare If Equipped
354. sion will shift from the current gear directly to gear D 248 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehi cle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following proced
355. solines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Sin
356. splay window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK butt
357. steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets The memory switch is located on the driver s door panel The switch contains an 5 button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropri ate side of the switch Memory Switch Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 2 Press and release the Set 5 button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 within 5 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows 1 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 2 Press and release the Set 5 button on the memory
358. steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL changer if equipped will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 44 RW FF 44 SEEK 0 ver I Crewe Pao RND SET 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stop
359. stem Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one
360. te the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Cassette Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either or Satellite if equipped mode 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds satellite scan 8 seconds at each listenable station before continu ing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for
361. ted at your authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 49 for more information 12 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level If so the vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUM
362. tellite 214 Reception Quality 215 lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 215 Radio Operation 216 Tape Player Operation 217 CD Player Operation Satellite Radio Operation Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 217 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 218 lll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 219 W Climate Controls 219 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating SYSTEME eh Raa Se dcos a 219 Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 222 2 221 Operating Tips ak ater x ea eas ee se 226 ll Rear Window Features 220 Electric Rear Window Defroster 229 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Hazard Switch 4 Analog Clock 5 Electronic Stability Program Off Button Traction Control System Off Button 6 Glove Box 7 Radio 8 Climate Control 9 Heated Seat Switch 10 Power Outlet 11 Ash Tray 12 Storage Compartment 81847219 13 Ignition Switch 14 Hood Release 15 Trunk Release Switch 16 Headlight Switch f Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
363. tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all
364. the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the controls on the climate control from a dual sun sensor located in the top of the instrument panel from an infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input The dual sun sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshield The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Other sensors take account of vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the Mode Control knob on the right to AUTO and place the Blower Control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the drive
365. the engine warms up STARTING AND OPERATING 237 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on ing precautions are not observed the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power a complete stop Module Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 238 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling n
366. the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional mm factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom Improper towing can lead to an injury accident mended Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer
367. the lever results in an increase of 1 mph Canada 1 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pushing the lever down and holding SET DECEL If the lever is continually held the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph Canada 10 km h increments until the lever is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pushing the lever down and releasing once will result in a 1 mph Canada 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent push and release of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph Canada 1 km h NOTE e When you use the lever to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automati cally slow the vehicle e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Setting the Following Distance in ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between long medium and short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC Cer a
368. tinue to pay attention to your sur roundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If Service Park Assist System appears in the Electronic V
369. tion switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for Low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for High speed wiper operation 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multi function lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push the multi function lever inward toward the steer ing column t
370. to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended language is deleted when vehicle is not in motion After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de
371. to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec tor lever is in D Drive or R Reverse position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission selector lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unat tended inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal opera tion 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI that holds the selector lever in the P Park position when the ignition sw
372. tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an acci nad dent FIG 1 WITHOUT WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION INCORRECT Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional infor mation FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gigimes Weight Distributing Hitch System STARTING AND OPERATING 301 EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for s
373. tractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing back in Tighten webbing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tether Strap Mounting 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child r
374. ultisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre uency kHz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3
375. um base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufac turer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts for the correct fluid type The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed as follows Normal Usage No change necessary Severe Usage fluid and filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule Severe Usage is defined as e Police taxi limousine commercial type operati
376. und will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 quart 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines 8131ee6a Engine Oil Dipstick MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the fol
377. ure Stop the vehicle Move the selector lever to the P Park position Turn off the engine Wait approximately 10 seconds oF oco m onc Restart the engine 6 Move the selector lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest STARTING AND OPERATING 249 possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times Follow the reset procedure described under Tem porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section In Permanent Limp Home Mode P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the D Drive shifter position The mal function indicator light may illuminate AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle p
378. ure Air Recirculation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable outside or recirculated on or off 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right t
379. urn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Turning the tune knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Turn the tune knob to select the following format types Program Type 16 a Dis No program type or un ane defined News News Information Information Sports Sports Talk Talk Rock Rock Classic Rock Classic_Rock Adult Hits Adult_Hits 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Soft Rock Soft Rock Top 40 Top 40 Country Country Oldies Oldies Soft Soft Nostalgia Nostalgia Jazz Jazz Classical Classical Rhythm and Blues Rhythm Blues Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft amp B Foreign Language Foreign Language Relig
380. ution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders 300 Models Perform the following steps to clean the center console cup holders e Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder firmly and lift upward to remove e Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour e After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris e Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 e Carefully tuck the front followed by the rear then side edges of the cup holder into the center console Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders 300C and 300 Touring Models Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cup holder in the center console NOTE The cup holder cannot be removed FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS Fuses Front Power Distribution Center A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment This center contains fuses and relays Front Power Distribution Center 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
381. vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections Jump Starting WARNING You should not try to start your vehicle by push ing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture
382. vide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on y
383. when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 252 STARTING AND OPERATING The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the applied It does not show the degree of brake application parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle
384. working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you M C 5 U L 5 8 have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your E Reporting Safety Defects 409 Vehicle 422i esr e ao sad 406 MC NNNM 409 Prepare For The Appointment 406 Bl Publication Order 409 A List sic 05 a r pc a oe ons 406 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 406 Quality 410 If You Need Assistance 406 Treadwear 44 405 2484 ese SEA eae 411 Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 408 Traction Grades Mopar Parts 9 hey ees 408 Temperature Grades 406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discus
385. y Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds programmable when leaving your ve hicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch on again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the d
386. y When this occurs you should immedi ately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead cii ef 110 m Ihn Al 818e9519 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status Menu Button Press the Menu button located on the steering wheel repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ACC OFF ACC READY When ACC is deactivated the display will read When ACC is activated the display will read ACC OFF READY HLL REAL WIS I gc TM e mi 818e94e1 Li 818e94fb UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 ACC SET 8197267d 7 The ACC SET screen will display once again if any i MEE ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following 1 Sensed Vehicle Indicator 2 Set Speed e Set speed change 3 Your Vehicle 4 Following Distance Setting Three Bars Long Two Bars e Distance setting change Medium One Bar Short The set speed will continue to display in place of the System cancel odometer reading when changing the EVIC display e Acquisition loss of Target while ACC is set e Driver override 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
387. you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up
388. your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN Audio Clock Display is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to lect thi tion to ch the si f the clock th increase the clock by another minute audio screens 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 1 When you are at an audio screen quickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode 2 In this example the large QUE appears on the screen mm Press ENTER to save your changes If you pres
389. ystems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the emis sion control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to
390. zed dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the ACC Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays SERVICE it indicates there is an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Precautions While Driving with ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 81869557 Turns Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpected

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents